blob: 5889f94067005a548ad00061f55c0e114f8959ae [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000021#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
23#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000024#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000030#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000032#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000033#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000034#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000035#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000037#include "llvm/IR/DebugLoc.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000038#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
41#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
43#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000044#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
45#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000046#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
48#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
49#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
50#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000051#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000052#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000053#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000054#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
56#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
57#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000058#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000059#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000060#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
61#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000062#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000063#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000064#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000065#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000066#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000067#include <cassert>
68#include <climits>
69#include <cstddef>
70#include <cstdint>
71#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000072#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000073#include <set>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000074#include <utility>
75#include <vector>
76
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000077using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000078using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000079
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000080#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
81
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000082// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
83// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
84// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
85// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000086static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
87 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
88 cl::desc(
89 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
90
91static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
92 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
93 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000094
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000095static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000096 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
97 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000098
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000099static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
100 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
101 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000102
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000103static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
104 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
105 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
106 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
107 "predicated store"));
108
109static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
110 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
111 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
112 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
113
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000114static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
115 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
116 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
117 "executed"));
118
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000119static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
120 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
121 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
122 "speculatively executed instructions"));
123
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000124STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000125STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
126 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
127STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
128 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
129STATISTIC(
130 NumLookupTablesHoles,
131 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000132STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000133STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
134 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000135STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000136
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000137namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000138
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000139// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
140// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
141// cases composing the case group.
142typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000143 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000144// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
145// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
146// switch for that PHI.
147typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000148
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000149/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
150struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
151 ConstantInt *Value;
152 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000153
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000154 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000155 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
156
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000157 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
158 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
159 return Value < RHS.Value;
160 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000161
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000162 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
163};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000164
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000165class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000166 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000167 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000168 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000169 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000170 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000171 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
172 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000173 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000174 BasicBlock *Pred,
175 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000176 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
177 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000178
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000179 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000180 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000181 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
182 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000183 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000184 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000185 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000186 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000187 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
188 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000189
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000190public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000191 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +0000192 unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000193 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +0000194 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold),
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000195 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000196
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000197 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
198};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000199
200} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000201
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000202/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000203/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000204static bool
205SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000206 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000207 if (SI1 == SI2)
208 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000209
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000210 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
211 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
212 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
213 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
214 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000215
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000216 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
217 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000218 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
219 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
220 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000221 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
222 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000223 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
224 if (FailBlocks)
225 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
226 Fail = true;
227 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000228 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000229
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000230 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000231}
232
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000233/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
234/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
235/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000236static bool
237isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
238 Instruction *Cond,
239 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
240 if (SI1 == SI2)
241 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000242 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
243
244 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000245 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000246 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
247 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
248 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
249 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000250 if (!Ci2)
251 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000252 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
253 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
254 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
255 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
256 return false;
257
258 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
259 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000260 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000261 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
262 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
263 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000264 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
265 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000266 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000267 return false;
268 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
269 }
270 return true;
271}
272
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000273/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
274/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
275/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
276/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000277static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
278 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000279 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
280 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000281
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000282 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000283 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000284 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000285}
286
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000287/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
288/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
289/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000290/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000291static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000292 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000293 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000294 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000295 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000296}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000297
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000298/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
299/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000300/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
301/// which works well enough for us.
302///
303/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000304/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
305/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
306/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
307/// set and true is returned.
308///
309/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
310/// Select whose cost is 2.
311///
312/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
313/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
314/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000315static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000316 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000317 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000318 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
319 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000320 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
321 // so limit the recursion depth.
322 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
323 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
324 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
325 return false;
326
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000327 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000328 if (!I) {
329 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
330 // can be executed unconditionally.
331 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
332 if (C->canTrap())
333 return false;
334 return true;
335 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000336 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000337
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000338 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000339 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000340 if (PBB == BB)
341 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000342
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000343 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
344 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000345 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
346 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000347 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000348 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000349
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000350 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
351 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000352 if (!AggressiveInsts)
353 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000354
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000355 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000356 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
357 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000358
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000359 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
360 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
361 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000362 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000363 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000364
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000365 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000366
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000367 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
368 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
369 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
370 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
371 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
372 // enabled further IR optimizations.
373 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
374 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000375 return false;
376
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000377 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
378 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000379
380 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
381 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000382 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000383 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
384 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000385 return false;
386 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
387 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000388 return true;
389}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000390
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000391/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000392/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000393static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000394 // Normal constant int.
395 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000396 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000397 return CI;
398
399 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
400 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000401 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000402
403 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
404 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
405 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
406
407 // IntToPtr const int.
408 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
409 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
410 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
411 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
412 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
413 return CI;
414 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000415 return cast<ConstantInt>(
416 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000417 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000418 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000419}
420
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000421namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000422
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000423/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
424/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
425/// structure.
426/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
427/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
428/// representing the different cases for the switch.
429/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
430/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
431/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
432/// fail.
433struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000434 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000435 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
436 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
437 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
438 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000439
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000440 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000441 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
442 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
443 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000444 }
445
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000446 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000447 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000448 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000449 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000450
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000451private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000452 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
453 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
454 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000455 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
456 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000457 CompValue = NewVal;
458 return (CompValue != nullptr);
459 }
460
461 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
462 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
463 /// match depending on isEQ).
464 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
465 /// against is placed in CompValue.
466 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
467 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000468 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000469 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
470 ICmpInst *ICI;
471 ConstantInt *C;
472 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000473 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000474 return false;
475 }
476
477 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000478 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000479
480 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000481 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000482 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000483 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000484
485 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
486 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
487
488 /*
489 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
490 x : BITVECTOR(64);
491 y : BITVECTOR(64);
492 z : BITVECTOR(64);
493 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
494 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
495 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
496 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000497 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
498 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
499 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000500 */
501
502 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
503 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
504 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
505 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
506 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
507 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
508 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
509
510 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
511 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
512 //
513 // mask = (1 << z)
514 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
515 //
516 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
517 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
518
519 // Pattern match a special case:
520 /*
521 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
522 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
523 );
524 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000525 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000526 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
527 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000528 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000529 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000530 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000531 return false;
532
533 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000534 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000535 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
536 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000537 UsedICmps++;
538 return true;
539 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000540 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000541
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000542 // Pattern match a special case:
543 /*
544 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
545 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
546 );
547 */
548 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
549 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
550 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
551 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
552 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
553 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
554 return false;
555
556 Vals.push_back(C);
557 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
558 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
559 UsedICmps++;
560 return true;
561 }
562 }
563
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000564 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000565 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000566 return false;
567
568 UsedICmps++;
569 Vals.push_back(C);
570 return ICI->getOperand(0);
571 }
572
573 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000574 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
575 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000576
577 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
578 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
579 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000580 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
581 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000582 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
583 }
584
585 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
586 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
587 // x != 0 && x != 1.
588 if (!isEQ)
589 Span = Span.inverse();
590
591 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
592 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
593 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000594 }
595
596 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000597 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000598 return false;
599
600 // Add all values from the range to the set
601 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
602 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000603
604 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000606 }
607
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000608 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000609 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
610 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
611 /// vector.
612 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000613 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000614 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
615 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000616
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000617 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
618 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000619 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000620
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000621 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000622 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000623 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000624
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000625 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000626 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000627
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000628 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
629 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
630 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000631 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
632 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
633 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
634 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000635 continue;
636 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000637
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000638 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000639 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000640 // Match succeed, continue the loop
641 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000642 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000643
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000644 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
645 // comparison against the same value as the others.
646 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
647 if (!Extra) {
648 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000649 continue;
650 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000651 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
652 CompValue = nullptr;
653 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000654 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000655 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000656};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000657
658} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000659
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000660static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000661 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000662 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
663 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
664 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
665 if (BI->isConditional())
666 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000667 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
668 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000669 }
670
671 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000672 if (Cond)
673 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000674}
675
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000676/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000677/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000678Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000679 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000680 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
681 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
682 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000683 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
684 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
685 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000686 CV = SI->getCondition();
687 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000688 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000689 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000690 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000691 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000692 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000693
694 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000695 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000696 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
697 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000698 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000699 CV = Ptr;
700 }
701 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000702 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000703}
704
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000705/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000706/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000707BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
708 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000709 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000710 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000711 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
712 ++i)
713 Cases.push_back(
714 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000715 return SI->getDefaultDest();
716 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000717
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000718 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000719 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000720 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000721 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
722 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000723 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000724}
725
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000726/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000727/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000728static void
729EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
730 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000731 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000732}
733
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000734/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000735static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
736 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000737 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
738
739 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
740 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
741 std::swap(V1, V2);
742
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000743 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000744 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000745 if (V1->size() == 1) {
746 // Just scan V2.
747 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
748 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
749 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
750 return true;
751 }
752
753 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
754 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
755 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
756 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
757 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
758 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
759 return true;
760 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
761 ++i1;
762 else
763 ++i2;
764 }
765 return false;
766}
767
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000768/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
769/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
770/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
771/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
772/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000773bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
774 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000775 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000776 if (!PredVal)
777 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000778
779 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
780 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000781 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
782 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000783
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000784 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
785 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
786
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000787 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000788 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000789 BasicBlock *PredDef =
790 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
791 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000792
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000793 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000794 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000795 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000796 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000797
798 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
799 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
800 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
801 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
802 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
803 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000804 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000805 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000806
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000807 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
808 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
809 // uncond br.
810 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
811 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000812 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000813 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000814
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000815 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000816 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000817
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000818 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000819 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
820 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000821
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000822 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
823 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000824 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000825
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000826 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
827 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000828 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000829 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
830 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000831
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000832 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000833 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000834
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000835 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
836 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000837 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000838 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
839 if (HasWeight)
840 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
841 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000842 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000843 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
844 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000845 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
846 --i;
847 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000848 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000849 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000850 Weights.pop_back();
851 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000852 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
853 SI->removeCase(i);
854 }
855 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000856 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000857 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000858 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
859 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000860
861 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000862 return true;
863 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000864
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000865 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
866 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000867 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000868 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000869 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
870 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000871 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000872 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000873 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
874 }
875 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000876
877 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
878 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000879 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000880 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
881 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
882 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
883 break;
884 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000885
886 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000887 if (!TheRealDest)
888 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000889
890 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
891 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000892 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
893 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
894 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000895 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000896 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000897
898 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000899 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000900 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000901
902 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000903 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
904 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000905
906 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
907 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000908}
909
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000910namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000911
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000912/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
913/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
914/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
915struct ConstantIntOrdering {
916 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
917 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
918 }
919};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000920
921} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000922
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000923static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
924 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
925 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
926 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000927 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000928 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000929 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000930}
931
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000932static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000933 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000934 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000935 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000936 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
937
938 return false;
939}
940
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000941/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
942/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
943/// metadata.
944static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
945 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000946 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000947 assert(MD);
948 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000949 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000950 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000951 }
952
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000953 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
954 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
955 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000956 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000957 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
958 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
959 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
960 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000961 }
962}
963
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000964/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000965static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000966 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
967 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
968 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
969 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
970 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000971 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000972}
973
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000974/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
975/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000976/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
977/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000978bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
979 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000980 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000981 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000982 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
983 bool Changed = false;
984
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000985 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000986 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000987 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000988
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000989 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
990 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000991 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000992
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000993 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000994 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000995 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
996 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
997 std::vector<BasicBlock*> Blocks = { TI->getParent() };
998 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, Blocks, ".fold.split"))
999 return false;
1000 }
1001 }
1002
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001003 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001004 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001005 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1006
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001007 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001008 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1009
1010 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1011 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1012 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001013 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001014
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001015 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1016 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001017 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1018 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1019
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001020 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001021 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001022 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001023 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1024 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1025 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001026 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1027 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1028 // successor's weights
1029 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001030
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001031 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001032 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001033 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001034 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001035 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1036 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1037 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001038 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001039
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001040 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1041 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1042 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001043 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001044 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1045 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1046 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1047 else {
1048 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1049 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001050
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001051 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1052 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001053 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1054 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001055 Weights.pop_back();
1056 }
1057
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001058 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001059 --i;
1060 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001061 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001062
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001063 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001064 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1065 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1066 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1067 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1068 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001069
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001070 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1071 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001072 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1073 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1074 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1075 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1076 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001077 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1078 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1079 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1080 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001081 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1082 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001083 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001084 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001085
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001086 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1087 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1088 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1089 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1090 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1091 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1092 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1093 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001094 } else {
1095 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1096 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1097 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001098 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1099 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001100 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1101 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1102 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001103
1104 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001105 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1106 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001107 Weights.pop_back();
1108 }
1109
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001110 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1111 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001112 --i;
1113 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001114 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001115
1116 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1117 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001118 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1119 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1120 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001121 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1122 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001123 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1124 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001125 PTIHandled.erase(
1126 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001127 }
1128
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001129 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1130 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001131 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001132 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001133 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1134 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001135 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001136 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001137 }
1138
1139 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1140 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1141 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001142 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1143 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001144
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001145 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001146 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001147 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001148 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001149 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001150 }
1151
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001152 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001153 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1154 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001155 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001156 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1157 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001158
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001159 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1160 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1161 FitWeights(Weights);
1162
1163 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1164
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001165 NewSI->setMetadata(
1166 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1167 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001168 }
1169
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001170 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001171
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001172 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1173 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1174 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001175 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001176 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1177 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001178 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001179 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001180 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001181 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1182 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001183 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001184 }
1185 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1186 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001187
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001188 Changed = true;
1189 }
1190 }
1191 return Changed;
1192}
1193
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001194// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1195// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1196// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001197static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1198 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001199 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001200 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001201 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001202 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1203 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1204 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001205 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001206 return false;
1207 }
1208 }
1209 }
1210 return true;
1211}
1212
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001213static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1214
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001215/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1216/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1217/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001218static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001219 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001220 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1221 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1222 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1223 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1224 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001225 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1226 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001227
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001228 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1229 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1230
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001231 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001232 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1233 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1234 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1235 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1236 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001237 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001238 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001239 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001240 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001241 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001242 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001243 return false;
1244
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001245 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001246
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001247 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001248 do {
1249 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1250 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1251 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1252 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001253
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001254 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1255 return Changed;
1256
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001257 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1258 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1259 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001260 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001261 if (!I2->use_empty())
1262 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Peter Collingbourne8f1dd5c2016-09-07 23:39:04 +00001263 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001264 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1265 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1266 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1267 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1268 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1269 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1270 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1271 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1272 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1273 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001274 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001275
1276 // If the debug loc for I1 and I2 are different, as we are combining them
1277 // into one instruction, we do not want to select debug loc randomly from
1278 // I1 or I2. Instead, we set the 0-line DebugLoc to note that we do not
1279 // know the debug loc of the hoisted instruction.
1280 if (!isa<CallInst>(I1) && I1->getDebugLoc() != I2->getDebugLoc())
1281 I1->setDebugLoc(DebugLoc());
1282
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001283 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001284 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001285
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001286 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1287 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001288 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1289 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1290 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1291 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1292 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001293 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001294 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001295 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001296 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001297 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001298
1299 return true;
1300
1301HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001302 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1303 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001304 return Changed;
1305
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001306 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001307 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001308 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001309 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1310 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1311 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1312 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1313 continue;
1314
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001315 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1316 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1317 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1318 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001319 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001320
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001321 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001322 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001323 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001324 return Changed;
1325 }
1326 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001327
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001328 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001329 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001330 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001331 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001332 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1333 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001334 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001335 }
1336
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001337 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001338 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1339 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1340 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1341 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001342 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001343 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001344 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001345 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001346 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001347 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1348 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001349 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1350 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001351
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001352 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1353 // that determines the right value.
1354 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001355 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001356 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1357 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1358 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001359
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001360 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1361 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1362 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1363 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001364 }
1365 }
1366
1367 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001368 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1369 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001370
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001371 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001372 return true;
1373}
1374
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001375// Is it legal to place a variable in operand \c OpIdx of \c I?
1376// FIXME: This should be promoted to Instruction.
1377static bool canReplaceOperandWithVariable(const Instruction *I,
1378 unsigned OpIdx) {
Hal Finkelac5803b2016-09-07 21:38:22 +00001379 // We can't have a PHI with a metadata type.
1380 if (I->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType()->isMetadataTy())
1381 return false;
1382
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001383 // Early exit.
1384 if (!isa<Constant>(I->getOperand(OpIdx)))
1385 return true;
1386
1387 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
1388 default:
1389 return true;
1390 case Instruction::Call:
1391 case Instruction::Invoke:
1392 // FIXME: many arithmetic intrinsics have no issue taking a
1393 // variable, however it's hard to distingish these from
1394 // specials such as @llvm.frameaddress that require a constant.
Sanjoy Dasbc357e82016-10-12 18:15:33 +00001395 if (isa<IntrinsicInst>(I))
1396 return false;
1397
1398 // Constant bundle operands may need to retain their constant-ness for
1399 // correctness.
1400 if (ImmutableCallSite(I).isBundleOperand(OpIdx))
1401 return false;
1402
1403 return true;
1404
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001405 case Instruction::ShuffleVector:
1406 // Shufflevector masks are constant.
1407 return OpIdx != 2;
1408 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
1409 case Instruction::InsertValue:
1410 // All operands apart from the first are constant.
1411 return OpIdx == 0;
1412 case Instruction::Alloca:
1413 return false;
1414 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
1415 if (OpIdx == 0)
1416 return true;
1417 gep_type_iterator It = std::next(gep_type_begin(I), OpIdx - 1);
Peter Collingbourneab85225b2016-12-02 02:24:42 +00001418 return It.isSequential();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001419 }
1420}
1421
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001422// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1423// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1424// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1425// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1426// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1427static bool canSinkInstructions(
1428 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1429 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001430 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1431 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1432 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1433 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1434 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1435 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1436 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1437 return false;
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001438 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1439 // have no uses.
1440 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1441 return false;
1442 }
1443
1444 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1445 for (auto *I : Insts)
1446 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1447 return false;
1448
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001449 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1450 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1451 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1452 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001453 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1454 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001455 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1456 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001457 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001458 return (PNUse &&
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001459 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001460 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1461 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001462 }))
1463 return false;
1464 }
1465
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001466 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1467 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1468 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1469 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001470
1471 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1472 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1473 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1474 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1475 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1476 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1477 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1478 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1479 if (OI == 1 && isa<StoreInst>(I0) &&
1480 any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1481 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1482 }))
1483 return false;
1484 if (OI == 0 && isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1485 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1486 }))
1487 return false;
1488
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001489 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001490 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1491 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001492 };
1493 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1494 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1495 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1496 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001497 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1498 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001499 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1500 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001501 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001502 for (auto *I : Insts)
1503 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001504 }
1505 }
1506 return true;
1507}
1508
1509// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1510// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1511// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001512static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001513 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1514
1515 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1516 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1517 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001518 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1519 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1520 do {
1521 I = I->getPrevNode();
1522 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1523 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1524 Insts.push_back(I);
1525 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001526
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001527 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1528 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1529 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1530 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001531 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001532 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1533 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1534 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1535 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1536 return U == PNUse;
1537 }))
1538 return false;
1539 }
1540
1541 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1542 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001543 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1544 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1545 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1546 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1547 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1548 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1549 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1550 // small mess we may make.
1551 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1552 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1553 });
1554 if (!NeedPHI) {
1555 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1556 continue;
1557 }
1558
1559 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1560 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1561 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1562 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1563 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1564 for (auto *I : Insts)
1565 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1566 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1567 }
1568
1569 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1570 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1571 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1572 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1573 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1574
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001575 // Update metadata and IR flags.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001576 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001577 if (I != I0) {
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001578 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001579 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1580 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001581
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001582 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1583 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1584 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1585 // instruction and nuke it.
1586 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1587 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1588 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1589 PN->eraseFromParent();
1590 }
1591
1592 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1593 for (auto *I : Insts)
1594 if (I != I0)
1595 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001596
1597 return true;
1598}
1599
1600namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001601
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001602 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1603 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1604 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1605 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1606 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1607 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1608 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1609 // ...
1610 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1611 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1612 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1613 bool Fail;
1614 public:
1615 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) :
1616 Blocks(Blocks) {
1617 reset();
1618 }
1619
1620 void reset() {
1621 Fail = false;
1622 Insts.clear();
1623 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001624 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1625 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1626 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1627 if (!Inst) {
1628 // Block wasn't big enough.
1629 Fail = true;
1630 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001631 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001632 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001633 }
1634 }
1635
1636 bool isValid() const {
1637 return !Fail;
1638 }
1639
1640 void operator -- () {
1641 if (Fail)
1642 return;
1643 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001644 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1645 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001646 // Already at beginning of block.
1647 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001648 Fail = true;
1649 return;
1650 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001651 }
1652 }
1653
1654 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1655 return Insts;
1656 }
1657 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001658
1659} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001660
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001661/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001662/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1663/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1664/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1665static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1666 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001667 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1668
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001669 // We support two situations:
1670 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1671 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1672 //
1673 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1674 // else-if patterns;
1675 //
1676 // if (a) f(1);
1677 // else if (b) f(2);
1678 //
1679 // produces:
1680 //
1681 // [if]
1682 // / \
1683 // [f(1)] [if]
1684 // | | \
1685 // | | \
1686 // | [f(2)]|
1687 // \ | /
1688 // [ end ]
1689 //
1690 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1691 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1692 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1693 //
1694 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1695 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1696 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1697 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1698 //
1699 // [if]
1700 // / \
1701 // [x(1)] [if]
1702 // | | \
1703 // | | \
1704 // | [x(2)] |
1705 // \ / |
1706 // [sink.split] |
1707 // \ /
1708 // [ end ]
1709 //
1710 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1711 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
1712 for (auto *B : predecessors(BBEnd)) {
1713 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1714 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1715 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1716 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1717 Cond = T;
1718 else
1719 return false;
1720 }
1721 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001722 return false;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001723
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001724 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001725 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1726 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1727 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1728 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1729 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1730 // PHIOperands.
1731 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1732 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1733 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001734 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001735 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1736 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1737 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1738 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1739 ++ScanIdx;
1740 --LRI;
1741 }
1742
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001743 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001744 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1745 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1746 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1747 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1748 ++NumPHIdValues;
1749 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1750 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1751 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1752 NumPHIInsts++;
1753
1754 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1755 };
1756
1757 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001758 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1759 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1760 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1761 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1762 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1763 LRI.reset();
1764 unsigned Idx = 0;
1765 bool Profitable = false;
1766 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1767 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1768 Profitable = true;
1769 break;
1770 }
1771 --LRI;
1772 ++Idx;
1773 }
1774 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001775 return false;
1776
1777 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
1778 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1779 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
1780 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BI1->getSuccessor(0), UnconditionalPreds,
1781 ".sink.split"))
1782 // Edges couldn't be split.
1783 return false;
1784 Changed = true;
1785 }
1786
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001787 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1788 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1789 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1790 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1791 // per sunk instruction).
1792 //
1793 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1794 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1795 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1796 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1797 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1798 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1799 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1800 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001801 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001802 << "\n");
1803
1804 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1805 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001806 LRI.reset();
1807 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001808 // Too many PHIs would be created.
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001809 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001810 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001811 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001812
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001813 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001814 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001815 NumSinkCommons++;
1816 Changed = true;
1817 }
1818 return Changed;
1819}
1820
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001821/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1822/// conditional block.
1823///
1824/// We are looking for code like the following:
1825/// BrBB:
1826/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1827/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1828/// ... // function).
1829/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1830/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1831/// ThenBB:
1832/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1833/// br label EndBB
1834/// EndBB:
1835/// ...
1836/// We are going to transform this into:
1837/// BrBB:
1838/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1839/// ... //
1840/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1841/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1842/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1843/// ...
1844///
1845/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1846/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001847static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1848 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001849 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1850 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001851 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001852
1853 // Volatile or atomic.
1854 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001855 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001856
1857 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1858
1859 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001860 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001861 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1862 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1863 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001864 // Skip debug info.
1865 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1866 continue;
1867 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001868
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001869 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001870 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001871 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001872
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001873 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1874 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1875 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1876 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1877 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001878 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001879 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001880 }
1881
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001882 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001883}
1884
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001885/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001886///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001887/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1888/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1889/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1890/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1891/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1892///
1893/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1894/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1895/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1896/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1897///
1898///
1899/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1900/// \code
1901/// BB:
1902/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1903/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1904/// ThenBB:
1905/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001906/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001907/// EndBB:
1908/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1909/// ...
1910/// \endcode
1911///
1912/// Into this IR:
1913/// \code
1914/// BB:
1915/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1916/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1917/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1918/// ...
1919/// \endcode
1920///
1921/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001922static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001923 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001924 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1925 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1926 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1927 return false;
1928
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001929 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1930 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1931
1932 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1933 // to swap the select operands later.
1934 bool Invert = false;
1935 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1936 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1937 Invert = true;
1938 }
1939 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1940
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001941 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1942 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1943 // - They are defined in BB, and
1944 // - They have no side effects, and
1945 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1946 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1947
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001948 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001949 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1950 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001951 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001952 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001953 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001954 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001955 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001956 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1957 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001958
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001959 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001960 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001961 ++SpeculationCost;
1962 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001963 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001964
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001965 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001966 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1967 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1968 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001969 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001970 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001971 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1972 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001973 return false;
1974
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001975 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1976 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1977 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1978
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001979 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001980 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001981 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001982 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001983 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001984 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001985 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1986
1987 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001988 }
1989 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001990
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001991 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1992 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1993 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001994 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1995 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1996 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001997 I != E; ++I)
1998 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001999 ++SpeculationCost;
2000 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002001 return false;
2002 }
2003
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002004 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2005 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002006 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002007 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002008 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2009 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002010
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002011 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002012 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002013 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002014 continue;
2015
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002016 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
2017 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
2018 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
2019 return false;
2020
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002021 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002022 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2023 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2024 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002025 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2026
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002027 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2028 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002029 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002030 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2031 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002032 unsigned MaxCost =
2033 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002034 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002035 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002036
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002037 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2038 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2039 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002040 // constant expression.
2041 ++SpeculationCost;
2042 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002043 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002044 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002045
2046 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2047 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002048 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002049 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002050
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002051 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002052 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002053
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002054 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2055 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002056 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002057 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2058 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2059 if (Invert)
2060 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002061 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
2062 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002063 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
2064 }
2065
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002066 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2067 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002068 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002069 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2070
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002071 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002072 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2073 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002074
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002075 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002076 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002077 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
2078 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
2079 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2080 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2081 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2082 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
2083
2084 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2085 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2086 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002087
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002088 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002089 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2090 // destinations were inverted.
2091 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002092 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002093 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002094 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
2095 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002096 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2097 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002098 }
2099
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002100 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002101 return true;
2102}
2103
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002104/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002105static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2106 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002107 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002108
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00002109 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002110 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2111 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002112 if (Size > 10)
2113 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002114 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002115
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002116 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002117 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002118 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
2119 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002120 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2121 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002122 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002123
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002124 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2125 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002126
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002127 return true;
2128}
2129
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002130/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2131/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2132/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002133static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002134 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2135 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002136 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2137 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002138 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2139 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002140
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002141 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2142 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002143 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002144 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002145 }
2146
2147 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002148 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2149 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002150
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002151 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002152 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002153 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2154 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2155 }))
2156 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002157
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002158 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2159 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002160 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002161 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002162 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2163 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002164
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002165 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2166 // branch to RealDest.
2167 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2168 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002169
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002170 if (RealDest == BB)
2171 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002172 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002173 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2174 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002175
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002176 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2177 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2178 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2179 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002180 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2181 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2182 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002183 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002184
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002185 // Update PHI nodes.
2186 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002187
2188 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2189 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2190 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2191 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002192 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002193 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2194 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2195 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2196 continue;
2197 }
2198 // Clone the instruction.
2199 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002200 if (BBI->hasName())
2201 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002202
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002203 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002204 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2205 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002206 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2207 *i = PI->second;
2208 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002209
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002210 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002211 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002212 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2213 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2214 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2215 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
2216 N = nullptr;
2217 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002218 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002219 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002220 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002221 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002222 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2223 if (N)
2224 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002225 }
2226
2227 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2228 // to EdgeBB instead.
2229 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2230 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2231 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2232 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2233 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2234 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002235
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002236 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002237 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002238 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002239
2240 return false;
2241}
2242
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002243/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2244/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002245static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2246 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002247 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2248 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2249 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2250 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2251 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2252 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002253 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2254 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2255 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002256 if (!IfCond ||
2257 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2258 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2259 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002260
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002261 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2262 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2263 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2264 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2265 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2266 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2267 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2268 if (NumPhis > 2)
2269 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002270
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002271 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2272 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2273 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002274 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002275 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2276 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002277 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2278 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002279
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002280 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2281 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002282 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002283 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002284 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002285 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002286 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002287
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002288 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002289 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002290 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002291 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002292 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002293 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002294
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002295 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002296 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2297 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002298 if (!PN)
2299 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002300
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002301 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2302 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2303 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2304 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2305 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2306 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2307 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002308
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002309 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2310 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2311 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2312 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002313 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002314 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2315 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2316 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002317 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002318 } else {
2319 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002320 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2321 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002322 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002323 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002324 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2325 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002326 return false;
2327 }
2328 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002329
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002330 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002331 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002332 } else {
2333 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002334 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2335 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002336 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002337 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002338 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2339 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002340 return false;
2341 }
2342 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002343
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002344 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002345 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002346
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002347 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2348 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002349 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002350 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002351
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002352 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2353 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002354 if (IfBlock1) {
2355 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2356 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002357 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002358 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002359 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002360 }
2361 if (IfBlock2) {
2362 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2363 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002364 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002365 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002366 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002367 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002368
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002369 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2370 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002371 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002372 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002373
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002374 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2375 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2376 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002377 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002378 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002379
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002380 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2381 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2382 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2383 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002384 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2385 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002386 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002387 return true;
2388}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002389
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002390/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2391/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002392/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002393static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002394 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002395 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2396 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2397 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2398 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2399 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002400
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002401 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2402 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2403 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002404 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002405 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002406 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002407 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002408
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002409 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002410 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2411 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2412 // branch into a return.
2413 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2414 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2415 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002416 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002417 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002418 return true;
2419 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002420
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002421 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2422 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2423 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2424 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002425
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002426 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2427 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2428 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2429 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2430 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2431 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2432 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002433
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002434 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2435 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2436 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2437 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2438 // safe.
2439 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2440 if (TCV->canTrap())
2441 return false;
2442 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2443 if (FCV->canTrap())
2444 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002445
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002446 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2447 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2448 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2449 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002450
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002451 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2452 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002453 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002454 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002455 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2456 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2457 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2458 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002459 TrueValue =
2460 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002461 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002462 }
2463
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002464 Value *RI =
2465 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002466
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002467 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002468
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002469 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002470 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002471 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002472
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002473 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2474
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002475 return true;
2476}
2477
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002478/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002479/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002480static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002481 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2482 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002483 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2484 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002485 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2486 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2487 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2488 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2489 return true;
2490 }
2491 }
2492 return false;
2493}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002494
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002495/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2496/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2497/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2498static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2499 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2500 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2501 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2502 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2503 bool PredHasWeights =
2504 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2505 bool SuccHasWeights =
2506 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2507 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2508 if (!PredHasWeights)
2509 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2510 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2511 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2512 return true;
2513 } else {
2514 return false;
2515 }
2516}
2517
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002518/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2519/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2520/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002521bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002522 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002523
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002524 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002525 if (BI->isConditional())
2526 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2527 else {
2528 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2529 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2530 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2531 // predecessor.
2532 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2533 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2534 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2535 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2536 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002537 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002538 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002539 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2540 Cond = Curr;
2541 break;
2542 }
2543 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2544 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2545 return false;
2546 }
2547 }
2548
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002549 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002550 return false;
2551 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002552
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002553 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2554 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002555 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002556
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002557 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002558 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002559
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002560 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002561 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2562 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002563
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002564 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002565 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002566
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002567 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2568 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2569 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2570 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2571 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2572 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002573 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002574 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2575 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2576 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002577 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002578 return false;
2579 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2580 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2581 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2582 return false;
2583 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2584 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2585 // and Cond.
2586 ++NumBonusInsts;
2587 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2588 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2589 return false;
2590 }
2591
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002592 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2593 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2594 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2595 if (CE->canTrap())
2596 return false;
2597 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2598 if (CE->canTrap())
2599 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002600
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002601 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002602 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002603 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002604 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2605 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002606
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002607 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2608 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002609 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002610
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002611 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2612 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2613 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002614 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002615 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002616 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002617 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2618 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002619 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002620
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002621 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002622 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002623 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002624
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002625 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002626 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002627 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002628 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002629 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002630 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2631 Opc = Instruction::And;
2632 InvertPredCond = true;
2633 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2634 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2635 InvertPredCond = true;
2636 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002637 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002638 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002639 } else {
2640 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2641 continue;
2642 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002643
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002644 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002645 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002646
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002647 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2648 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002649 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002650
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002651 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2652 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2653 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2654 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002655 NewCond =
2656 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002657 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002658
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002659 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002660 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002661 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002662
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002663 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002664 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002665 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2666 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2667 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002668 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002669 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002670 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002671 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2672 continue;
2673 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2674 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002675 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002676 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002677
2678 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2679 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2680 // only given the branch precondition.
2681 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2682 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002683 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002684
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002685 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2686 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002687 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002688 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002689
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002690 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2691 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002692 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002693 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002694 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002695 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002696 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002697 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002698
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002699 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002700 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2701 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002702 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2703
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002704 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002705 bool HasWeights =
2706 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2707 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002708 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2709
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002710 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002711 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002712 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2713 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002714 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002715 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002716 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002717 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2718 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2719 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002720 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2721 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2722 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002723 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002724 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2725 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2726 }
2727 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002728 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002729 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2730 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002731 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002732 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002733 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2734 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2735 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2736 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002737 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2738 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002739 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2740 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2741 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002742 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2743 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2744 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2745
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002746 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2747 NewWeights.end());
2748 PBI->setMetadata(
2749 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2750 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002751 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002752 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002753 } else {
2754 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2755 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002756 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002757 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002758 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002759 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002760 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2761 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2762 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2763 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002764 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2765 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2766 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2767 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002768 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002769 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2770 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002771 } else {
2772 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2773 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2774 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002775 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2776 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002777 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002778 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2779 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2780 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2781 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002782 }
2783 }
2784 // Update PHI Node.
2785 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2786 MergedCond);
2787 }
2788 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2789 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2790 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2791 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002792 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002793
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002794 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2795 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2796
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002797 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002798 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2799 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2800 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002801
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002802 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002803 }
2804 return false;
2805}
2806
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002807// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2808// nullptr.
2809static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2810 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2811 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2812 if (!BB)
2813 continue;
2814 for (auto &I : *BB)
2815 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2816 if (S)
2817 // Multiple stores seen.
2818 return nullptr;
2819 else
2820 S = SI;
2821 }
2822 }
2823 return S;
2824}
2825
2826static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2827 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2828 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2829 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2830 //
2831 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2832 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2833 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2834 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2835 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2836 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2837 // one.
2838 //
2839 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2840 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2841 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2842 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2843 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002844
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002845 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2846 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2847 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2848 if (!AlternativeV)
2849 break;
2850
2851 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2852 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2853 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2854 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2855 break;
2856 PHI = nullptr;
2857 }
2858 if (PHI)
2859 return PHI;
2860
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002861 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2862 if (!AlternativeV &&
2863 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2864 return V;
2865
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002866 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002867 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2868 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2869 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002870 PHI->addIncoming(
2871 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002872 return PHI;
2873}
2874
2875static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2876 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2877 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2878 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2879 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2880 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2881 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2882 };
2883
2884 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2885 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2886 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2887 if (!BB)
2888 return true;
2889 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2890 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2891 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002892 unsigned N = 0;
2893 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2894 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2895 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2896 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2897 ++N;
2898 // Free instructions.
2899 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2900 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2901 continue;
2902 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002903 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002904 }
2905 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002906 };
2907
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002908 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2909 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2910 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002911 return false;
2912
2913 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2914 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2915 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2916 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2917 // testing.
2918 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2919 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2920 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2921 return false;
2922
2923 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2924 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2925 return false;
2926
2927 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2928 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2929 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2930 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2931 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2932 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2933 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2934 //
2935 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2936 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2937 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2938 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2939 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2940 return false;
2941 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2942 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2943 return false;
2944 if (QTB)
2945 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2946 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2947 return false;
2948 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2949 I != E; ++I)
2950 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2951 return false;
2952
2953 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2954 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2955 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2956 ->getCondition();
2957 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2958 ->getCondition();
2959
2960 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2961 PStore->getParent());
2962 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2963 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2964
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002965 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2966
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002967 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2968 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2969
2970 if (InvertPCond)
2971 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2972 if (InvertQCond)
2973 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2974 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2975
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002976 auto *T =
2977 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002978 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2979 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2980 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2981 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2982 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2983 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2984
2985 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2986 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002987
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002988 return true;
2989}
2990
2991static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2992 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2993 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2994 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2995 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2996 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2997 // PBI and QBI.
2998 //
2999 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3000 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3001 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3002 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3003 //
3004 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3005 //
3006 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3007 // / \ | \
3008 // PTB PFB | PFB
3009 // \ / | /
3010 // QBI QBI
3011 // / \ | \
3012 // QTB QFB | QFB
3013 // \ / | /
3014 // PostBB PostBB
3015 //
3016 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3017 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3018 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003019 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003020 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3021 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3022 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3023 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3024 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3025
3026 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3027 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3028 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3029 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3030 InvertPCond = true;
3031 }
3032 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3033 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3034 InvertQCond = true;
3035 }
3036
3037 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3038 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3039 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3040 PTB = nullptr;
3041 if (QTB == PostBB)
3042 QTB = nullptr;
3043
3044 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3045 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3046 // predecessor.
3047 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003048 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003049 };
3050 if (!PostBB ||
3051 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
3052 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3053 return false;
3054 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3055 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3056 return false;
3057 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
3058 return false;
3059
3060 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3061 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003062 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003063 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3064 if (!BB)
3065 continue;
3066 for (auto &I : *BB)
3067 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3068 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3069 }
3070 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3071 if (!BB)
3072 continue;
3073 for (auto &I : *BB)
3074 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3075 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3076 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003077
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003078 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3079 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3080 // clear what it contains.
3081 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3082
3083 bool Changed = false;
3084 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3085 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
3086 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
3087 return Changed;
3088}
3089
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003090/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3091/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003092/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3093/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003094static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3095 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003096 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3097 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003098
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003099 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003100 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003101 // this conditional branch redundant.
3102 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3103 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3104 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3105 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3106 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3107 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3108 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003109 BI->setCondition(
3110 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3111 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003112 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003113
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003114 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3115 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3116 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3117 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003118 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003119 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3120 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3121 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003122 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3123 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3124 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003125 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003126 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003127 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3128 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003129 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3130 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003131 NewPN->addIncoming(
3132 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3133 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003134 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003135 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003136 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003137 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003138
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003139 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003140 return true;
3141 }
3142 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003143
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003144 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3145 if (CE->canTrap())
3146 return false;
3147
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003148 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3149 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3150 // merged store at the end.
3151 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
3152 return true;
3153
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003154 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003155 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003156 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003157 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3158 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3159 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3160 ++BBI;
3161 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003162 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003163
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003164 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003165 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3166 PBIOp = 0;
3167 BIOp = 0;
3168 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3169 PBIOp = 0;
3170 BIOp = 1;
3171 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3172 PBIOp = 1;
3173 BIOp = 0;
3174 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3175 PBIOp = 1;
3176 BIOp = 1;
3177 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003178 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003179 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003180
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003181 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3182 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3183 // keep getting unwound.
3184 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3185 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003186
3187 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003188 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3189 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003190
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003191 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3192 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3193 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3194
3195 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003196 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003197 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3198 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003199 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3200 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003201
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003202 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3203 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3204 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3205 if (CE->canTrap())
3206 return false;
3207
3208 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3209 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3210 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3211 if (CE->canTrap())
3212 return false;
3213 }
3214
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003215 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003216 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003217
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003218 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003219 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003220
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003221 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3222 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3223 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3224 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3225 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3226 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3227 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3228 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3229 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3230 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003231 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3232 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003233 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3234 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003235 }
3236
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003237 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003238
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003239 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3240 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003241
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003242 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3243 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003244 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003245 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003246 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003247
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003248 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3249 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003250 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003251
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003252 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003253 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003254
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003255 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3256 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3257 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3258 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003259
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003260 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3261 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003262 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003263 bool HasWeights =
3264 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3265 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003266 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003267 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3268 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3269 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3270 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003271 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3272 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3273 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003274 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3275 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3276 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003277 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003278 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3279
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003280 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003281 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3282 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003283 }
3284
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003285 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3286 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003287 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003288
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003289 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3290 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3291 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3292 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003293 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003294 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3295 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3296 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3297 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3298 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3299 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3300 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003301 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3302 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003303 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003304 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3305 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3306 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3307 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003308 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003309 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3310 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3311 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3312 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3313 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3314 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3315 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3316 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3317
3318 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3319
3320 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3321 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3322 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3323 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003324 }
3325 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003326
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003327 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3328 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003329
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003330 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3331 // one fewer predecessor.
3332 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003333}
3334
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003335// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3336// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003337// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3338// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3339// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3340static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003341 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3342 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003343 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003344 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3345 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3346 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3347 // successor.
3348 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003349 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003350
3351 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003352 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003353 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3354 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003355 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003356 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003357 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003358 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003359 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3360 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003361 }
3362
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003363 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3364 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3365
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003366 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003367 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003368 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3369 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3370 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003371 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003372 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003373 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3374 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003375 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3376 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3377 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003378 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3379 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003380 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003381 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3382 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3383 // terminator must be unreachable.
3384 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3385 } else {
3386 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3387 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3388 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003389 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003390 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003391 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003392 else
3393 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003394 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003395 }
3396
3397 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3398 return true;
3399}
3400
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003401// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003402// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3403// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3404// unconditional otherwise.
3405static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3406 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3407 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3408 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3409 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3410 return false;
3411
3412 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3413 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003414 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3415 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003416
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003417 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3418 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3419 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3420 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3421 if (HasWeights) {
3422 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3423 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003424 TrueWeight =
3425 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3426 FalseWeight =
3427 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003428 }
3429 }
3430
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003431 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003432 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3433 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003434}
3435
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003436// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003437// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3438// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3439// with
3440// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3441static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3442 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3443 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3444 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3445 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3446 return false;
3447
3448 // Extract the actual blocks.
3449 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3450 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3451
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003452 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003453 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3454 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003455}
3456
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003457/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3458/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003459/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3460/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3461/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3462/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3463/// like:
3464///
3465/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3466/// DEFAULT:
3467/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3468/// br label %end
3469/// end:
3470/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003471///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003472/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3473/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003474static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003475 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00003476 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003477 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003478
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003479 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3480 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003481 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3482 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003483
3484 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3485 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003486
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003487 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3488 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3489 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3490 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003491 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3492 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003493
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003494 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3495 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3496 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003497
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003498 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3499 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3500 // away.
3501 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3502 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3503 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3504 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003505
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003506 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003507 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003508 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3509 }
3510 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00003511 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003512 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003513
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003514 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3515 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3516 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003517 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003518 Value *V;
3519 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3520 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3521 else
3522 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003523
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003524 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3525 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3526 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00003527 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003528 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003529
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003530 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3531 // the block.
3532 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003533 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003534 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003535 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3536 return false;
3537
3538 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3539 // true in the PHI.
3540 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003541 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003542
3543 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3544 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3545
3546 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3547 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3548 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3549 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3550
3551 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3552 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003553 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3554 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003555 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3556 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3557 if (HasWeights) {
3558 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3559 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3560 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003561 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003562 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3563
3564 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003565 SI->setMetadata(
3566 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3567 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003568 }
3569 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003570 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003571
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003572 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003573 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3574 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3575 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003576 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3577 return true;
3578}
3579
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003580/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003581/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3582/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003583static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3584 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003585 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003586 if (!Cond)
3587 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003588
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003589 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3590 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3591 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003592
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003593 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003594 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3595 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003596 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003597 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3598 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3599 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003600
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003601 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003602 if (!CompVal)
3603 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003604
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003605 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3606 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3607 return false;
3608
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003609 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3610
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003611 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3612 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3613 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3614 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003615
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003616 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003617 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003618 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3619 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003620
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003621 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3622 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3623
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003624 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3625 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003626 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3627 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3628 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003629
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003630 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003631
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003632 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003633 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3634 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003635
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003636 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3637 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3638 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3639 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003640 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3641 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003642 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3643 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003644 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3645
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003646 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003647 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003648 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003649 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003650
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003651 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003652
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003653 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3654 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003655 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003656
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003657 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003658 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003659 BB = NewBB;
3660 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003661
3662 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003663 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3664 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003665 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3666 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003667 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003668
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003669 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003670 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003671
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003672 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3673 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3674 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003675
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003676 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3677 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3678 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003679 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003680 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3681 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003682 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003683 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3684 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003685
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003686 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3687 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003688
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003689 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003690 return true;
3691}
3692
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003693bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003694 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3695 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3696 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3697 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3698 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3699 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003700
3701 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003702}
3703
3704// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3705bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3706 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3707
3708 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3709 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3710 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003711 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003712 while (++I != E)
3713 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3714 return false;
3715
3716 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3717 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3718
3719 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003720 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3721 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003722 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3723 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3724
3725 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3726 // it has other dependents.
3727 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3728 continue;
3729
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003730 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003731 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3732 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3733 continue;
3734
3735 bool isTrivial = true;
3736
3737 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3738 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3739 while (++I != E)
3740 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3741 isTrivial = false;
3742 break;
3743 }
3744
3745 if (isTrivial)
3746 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3747 }
3748
3749 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003750 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3751 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003752
3753 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3754 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3755 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3756 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3757 // to remove them all.
3758 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3759 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3760
3761 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3762 PI != PE;) {
3763 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3764 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3765 }
3766
3767 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3768 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3769 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3770 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3771 // predecessors.
3772 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3773 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3774 }
3775
3776 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3777 if (pred_empty(BB))
3778 BB->eraseFromParent();
3779
3780 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3781}
3782
3783// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3784bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003785 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3786 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003787 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3788 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003789
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003790 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3791 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003792 while (++I != E)
3793 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3794 return false;
3795
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003796 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003797 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3798 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3799 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003800 }
3801
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003802 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3803 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003804 if (LoopHeaders)
3805 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003806 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003807}
3808
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003809static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003810 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3811 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3812 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3813 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3814 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3815 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3816 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3817 // simplified.
3818 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003819 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3820 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003821 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3822 return false;
3823
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003824 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3825 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3826 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3827 return false;
3828
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003829 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003830 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003831 while (++I != E) {
3832 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3833 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003834 return false;
3835
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003836 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3837 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3838 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3839 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3840 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3841 break;
3842 default:
3843 return false;
3844 }
3845 }
3846
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003847 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3848 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003849 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003850 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003851
3852 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3853 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3854 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3855 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3856 // are both EH pads).
3857 if (UnwindDest) {
3858 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3859 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003860 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003861 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003862 I != IE; ++I) {
3863 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003864
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003865 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003866 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003867 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003868 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3869 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3870 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3871 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3872 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3873 // pad being removed.
3874 //
3875 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3876 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3877 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3878 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3879 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3880 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3881
3882 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3883 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3884
3885 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3886 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3887 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3888 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003889 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003890 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003891 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3892 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3893 }
3894 } else {
3895 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3896 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3897 // predecessors with this value.
3898 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3899 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3900 }
3901 }
3902 }
3903
3904 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003905 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003906 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3907 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003908 I != IE;) {
3909 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3910 // being moved to another block.
3911 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3912 if (PN->use_empty())
3913 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3914 // when we erase BB below.
3915 continue;
3916
3917 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3918 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3919 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3920 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3921 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3922 if (pred != BB)
3923 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3924 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3925 }
3926 }
3927
3928 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3929 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3930 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003931 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003932 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003933 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003934 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003935 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003936 }
3937 }
3938
3939 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3940 BB->eraseFromParent();
3941 return true;
3942}
3943
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003944// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3945static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3946 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3947 // with.
3948 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3949 if (!UnwindDest)
3950 return false;
3951
3952 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3953 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3954 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3955 return false;
3956
3957 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3958 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3959 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3960 return false;
3961
3962 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3963 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3964 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3965 // funclet bundle operands.
3966 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3967 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3968 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3969 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3970 // destination.
3971 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3972 RI->eraseFromParent();
3973
3974 return true;
3975}
3976
3977bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003978 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3979 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3980 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3981 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3982 return false;
3983
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003984 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003985 return true;
3986
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003987 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003988 return true;
3989
3990 return false;
3991}
3992
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003993bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003994 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003995 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
3996 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003997
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003998 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003999 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4000 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004001 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4002 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004003 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4004 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4005 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4006 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4007 else
4008 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4009 }
4010 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004011
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004012 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004013 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004014 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4015 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4016 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004017 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004018 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004019 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004020
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004021 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004022 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004023 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4024 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004025 if (LoopHeaders)
4026 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004027 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004028
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004029 return true;
4030 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004031
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004032 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4033 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4034 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4035 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4036 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004037
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004038 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4039 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4040 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004041 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004042 return true;
4043 }
4044 return false;
4045}
4046
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004047bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4048 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004049
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004050 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004051
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004052 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4053 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004054 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4055 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004056 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004057 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4058 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4059 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004060 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4061 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004062
4063 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004064 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004065 if (SI->isVolatile())
4066 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004067 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004068 if (LI->isVolatile())
4069 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004070 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004071 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4072 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004073 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004074 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4075 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004076 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4077 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4078 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4079 // default.
4080 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4081 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4082 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4083 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004084 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4085 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004086 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004087 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004088 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4089 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4090 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4091 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004092 }
4093
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004094 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4095 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4096 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004097 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004098 Changed = true;
4099 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004100
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004101 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4102 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004103 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4104 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004105
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004106 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004107 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4108 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004109 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004110 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004111 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4112 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4113 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4114 TI->eraseFromParent();
4115 Changed = true;
4116 }
4117 } else {
4118 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004119 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004120 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4121 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004122 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004123 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4124 Changed = true;
4125 }
4126 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004127 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004128 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
4129 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004130 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004131 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4132 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004133 --i;
4134 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004135 Changed = true;
4136 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004137 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4138 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4139 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4140 Changed = true;
4141 }
4142 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4143 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4144 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4145 Changed = true;
4146 continue;
4147 }
4148
4149 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4150 E = CSI->handler_end();
4151 I != E; ++I) {
4152 if (*I == BB) {
4153 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4154 --I;
4155 --E;
4156 Changed = true;
4157 }
4158 }
4159 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4160 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4161 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4162 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4163 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4164 } else {
4165 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4166 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4167 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4168 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4169 }
4170 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4171 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4172 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4173 Changed = true;
4174 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004175 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004176 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4177 TI->eraseFromParent();
4178 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004179 }
4180 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004181
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004182 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004183 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004184 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4185 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004186 if (LoopHeaders)
4187 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004188 return true;
4189 }
4190
4191 return Changed;
4192}
4193
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004194static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4195 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4196
4197 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4198 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4199 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4200 return false;
4201 }
4202 return true;
4203}
4204
4205/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4206/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004207static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004208 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004209
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004210 bool HasDefault =
4211 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004212
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004213 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4214 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4215 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004216 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4217 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004218
4219 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
4220 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004221 if (!DestA)
4222 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004223 if (Dest == DestA) {
4224 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4225 continue;
4226 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004227 if (!DestB)
4228 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004229 if (Dest == DestB) {
4230 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4231 continue;
4232 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004233 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004234 }
4235
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004236 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4237 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004238 assert(DestA != DestB);
4239 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4240 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4241 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4242
4243 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4244 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4245 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4246 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4247 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4248 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4249 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4250 OtherDest = DestB;
4251 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4252 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4253 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4254 OtherDest = DestA;
4255 } else
4256 return false;
4257
4258 // Start building the compare and branch.
4259
4260 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004261 Constant *NumCases =
4262 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004263
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004264 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4265 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004266 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4267
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004268 Value *Cmp;
4269 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004270 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004271 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4272 else
4273 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004274 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004275
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004276 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004277 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4278 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004279 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4280 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004281 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4282 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4283 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4284 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4285 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4286 else
4287 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4288 }
4289 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4290 TrueWeight /= 2;
4291 FalseWeight /= 2;
4292 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004293 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004294 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4295 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4296 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004297 }
4298 }
4299
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004300 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4301 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4302 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004303 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4304 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004305 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004306 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4307 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004308 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4309 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004310 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4311 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004312 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4313 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4314 }
4315
4316 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004317 SI->eraseFromParent();
4318
4319 return true;
4320}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004321
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004322/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004323/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00004324static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004325 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004326 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004327 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00004328 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004329
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004330 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4331 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4332 // bits are in the condition value.
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00004333 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004334 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4335
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004336 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004337 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004338 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004339 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4340 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4341 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004342 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004343 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004344 }
4345 }
4346
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004347 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4348 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004349 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4350 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004351 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004352 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4353 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4354 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004355 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004356 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004357 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004358 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004359 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004360 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4361 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004362 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4363 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004364 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4365 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4366 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4367 return true;
4368 }
4369
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004370 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4371 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4372 if (HasWeight) {
4373 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4374 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4375 }
4376
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004377 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004378 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4379 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004380 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004381 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004382 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004383 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004384 Weights.pop_back();
4385 }
4386
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004387 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004388 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004389 SI->removeCase(Case);
4390 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004391 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004392 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4393 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004394 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4395 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004396 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004397
4398 return !DeadCases.empty();
4399}
4400
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004401/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4402/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004403/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4404/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4405/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4406static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004407 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004408 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004409 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004410 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004411 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004412
4413 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4414 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004415 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004416
4417 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4418
4419 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4420 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4421 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4422 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4423
4424 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004425 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4426 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004427
4428 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4429 return PHI;
4430 }
4431
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004432 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004433}
4434
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004435/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4436/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4437/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004438/// Returns true if a change is made.
4439static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004440 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004441 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4442
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004443 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4444 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004445 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4446 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004447
4448 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004449 PHINode *PHI =
4450 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4451 if (!PHI)
4452 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004453
4454 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4455 }
4456
4457 bool Changed = false;
4458
4459 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004460 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4461 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004462 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004463 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004464
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004465 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4466 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004467
4468 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4469 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4470 Changed = true;
4471 }
4472
4473 return Changed;
4474}
4475
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004476/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004477/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004478static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004479 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4480 return false;
4481 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4482 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004483
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004484 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4485 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4486 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4487 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004488
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004489 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004490 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4491 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004492 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4493 return false;
4494 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004495
4496 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4497 return false;
4498
4499 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004500}
4501
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004502/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004503/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004504static Constant *
4505LookupConstant(Value *V,
4506 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004507 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4508 return C;
4509 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4510}
4511
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004512/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004513/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4514/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004515/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004516static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004517ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4518 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004519 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004520 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4521 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004522 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004523 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4524 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4525 if (A->isNullValue())
4526 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004527 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004528 }
4529
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004530 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4531 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4532 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4533 COps.push_back(A);
4534 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004535 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004536 }
4537
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004538 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004539 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4540 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004541 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004542
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004543 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004544}
4545
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004546/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004547/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004548/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004549/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004550static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004551GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004552 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004553 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004554 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004555 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4556 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4557
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004558 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4559 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004560 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004561 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4562 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4563 ++I) {
4564 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4565 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004566 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004567 return false;
4568 Pred = CaseDest;
4569 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4570 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4571 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4572 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004573 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004574 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004575
4576 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4577 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4578 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4579 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4580 User *User = Use.getUser();
4581 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4582 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4583 continue;
4584 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4585 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4586 continue;
4587 return false;
4588 }
4589
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004590 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004591 } else {
4592 break;
4593 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004594 }
4595
4596 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4597 if (!*CommonDest)
4598 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4599 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4600 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4601 return false;
4602
4603 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4604 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4605 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4606 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4607 if (Idx == -1)
4608 continue;
4609
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004610 Constant *ConstVal =
4611 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004612 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004613 return false;
4614
4615 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004616 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004617 return false;
4618
4619 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4620 }
4621
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004622 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004623}
4624
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004625// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4626// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004627static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004628 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4629 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004630 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4631 if (I.first == Result) {
4632 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4633 return;
4634 }
4635 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004636 UniqueResults.push_back(
4637 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004638}
4639
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004640// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004641// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4642// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4643// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004644static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4645 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4646 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4647 Constant *&DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004648 const DataLayout &DL,
4649 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004650 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4651 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4652
4653 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4654 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4655 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004656 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004657 return false;
4658
4659 // Only one value per case is permitted
4660 if (Results.size() > 1)
4661 return false;
4662 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4663
4664 // Check the PHI consistency.
4665 if (!PHI)
4666 PHI = Results[0].first;
4667 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4668 return false;
4669 }
4670 // Find the default result value.
4671 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4672 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4673 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004674 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004675 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4676 // is unreachable.
4677 DefaultResult =
4678 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4679 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004680 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004681 return false;
4682
4683 return true;
4684}
4685
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004686// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4687// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004688// Example:
4689// switch (a) {
4690// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4691// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4692// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4693// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4694// default:
4695// return 4;
4696// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004697static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4698 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4699 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004700 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004701 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004702 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4703 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4704 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4705 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4706 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4707 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4708
4709 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4710 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4711 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4712 Value *const ValueCompare =
4713 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4714 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4715 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4716 }
4717 Value *const ValueCompare =
4718 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004719 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4720 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004721 }
4722
4723 return nullptr;
4724}
4725
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004726// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4727// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004728static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4729 Value *SelectValue,
4730 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4731 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4732 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4733 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4734 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4735
4736 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4737
4738 // Remove the switch.
4739 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4740 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4741
4742 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4743 continue;
4744 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4745 }
4746 SI->eraseFromParent();
4747}
4748
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004749/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004750/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4751/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4752static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00004753 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004754 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004755 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4756 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4757 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4758 Constant *DefaultResult;
4759 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4760 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004761 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004762 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004763 return false;
4764 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4765 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4766 return false;
4767 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4768
4769 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004770 Value *SelectValue =
4771 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004772 if (SelectValue) {
4773 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4774 return true;
4775 }
4776 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4777 return false;
4778}
4779
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004780namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004781
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004782/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4783class SwitchLookupTable {
4784public:
4785 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4786 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4787 SwitchLookupTable(
4788 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4789 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4790 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004791
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004792 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4793 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4794 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004795
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004796 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4797 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4798 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4799 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004800
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004801private:
4802 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4803 // different ways.
4804 enum {
4805 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4806 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4807 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004808
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004809 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4810 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4811 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4812 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004813
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004814 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4815 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4816 // shift and mask operations.
4817 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004818
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004819 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4820 // instructions from the table.
4821 ArrayKind
4822 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004823
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004824 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4825 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004826
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004827 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4828 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4829 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004830
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004831 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4832 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4833 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004834
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004835 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4836 GlobalVariable *Array;
4837};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004838
4839} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004840
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004841SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4842 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4843 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4844 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004845 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004846 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004847 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4848 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004849
4850 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004851 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004852
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004853 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4854
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004855 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004856 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004857 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4858 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4859 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004860 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004861
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004862 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004863 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4864
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004865 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004866 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004867 }
4868
4869 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004870 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004871 assert(DefaultValue &&
4872 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004873 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004874 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4875 if (!TableContents[I])
4876 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004877 }
4878
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004879 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004880 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004881 }
4882
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004883 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4884 // that single value.
4885 if (SingleValue) {
4886 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4887 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004888 }
4889
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004890 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4891 // table index.
4892 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4893 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4894 APInt PrevVal;
4895 APInt DistToPrev;
4896 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4897 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4898 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4899 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4900 if (!ConstVal) {
4901 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4902 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4903 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4904 break;
4905 }
4906 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4907 if (I != 0) {
4908 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4909 if (I == 1) {
4910 DistToPrev = Dist;
4911 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4912 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4913 break;
4914 }
4915 }
4916 PrevVal = Val;
4917 }
4918 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4919 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4920 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4921 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4922 ++NumLinearMaps;
4923 return;
4924 }
4925 }
4926
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004927 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004928 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004929 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004930 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4931 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4932 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004933 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4934 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4935 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4936 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4937 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004938 }
4939 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4940 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4941 Kind = BitMapKind;
4942 ++NumBitMaps;
4943 return;
4944 }
4945
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004946 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004947 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004948 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4949
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004950 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4951 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004952 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004953 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004954 Kind = ArrayKind;
4955}
4956
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004957Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004958 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004959 case SingleValueKind:
4960 return SingleValue;
4961 case LinearMapKind: {
4962 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4963 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4964 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4965 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4966 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4967 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4968 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4969 return Result;
4970 }
4971 case BitMapKind: {
4972 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4973 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004974
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004975 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4976 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4977 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4978 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004979
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004980 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4981 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4982 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4983 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004984
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004985 // Shift down.
4986 Value *DownShifted =
4987 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
4988 // Mask off.
4989 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
4990 }
4991 case ArrayKind: {
4992 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
4993 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4994 uint64_t TableSize =
4995 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
4996 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4997 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
4998 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4999 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005000
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005001 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5002 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5003 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5004 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5005 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005006 }
5007 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5008}
5009
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005010bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005011 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005012 Type *ElementType) {
5013 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005014 if (!IT)
5015 return false;
5016 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5017 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005018
5019 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005020 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005021 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005022 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005023}
5024
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005025/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5026/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005027static bool
5028ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5029 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5030 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005031 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5032 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005033
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005034 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005035 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005036 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5037 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005038
5039 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005040 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005041
5042 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005043 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5044 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5045 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005046
5047 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5048 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5049 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5050 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005051 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005052 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005053
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005054 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5055 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5056 return true;
5057
5058 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5059 if (HasIllegalType)
5060 return false;
5061
5062 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5063 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5064 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5065 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005066}
5067
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005068/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5069/// \code
5070/// if (idx < tablesize)
5071/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5072/// else
5073/// r = default_value;
5074/// if (r != default_value)
5075/// ...
5076/// \endcode
5077/// Is optimized to:
5078/// \code
5079/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5080/// if (cond)
5081/// r = table[idx];
5082/// else
5083/// r = default_value;
5084/// if (cond)
5085/// ...
5086/// \endcode
5087/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005088static void reuseTableCompare(
5089 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5090 Constant *DefaultValue,
5091 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005092
5093 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5094 if (!CmpInst)
5095 return;
5096
5097 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5098 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5099 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5100 return;
5101
5102 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5103 if (!CmpOp1)
5104 return;
5105
5106 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5107 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5108 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5109
5110 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5111 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5112 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5113 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5114 return;
5115
5116 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5117 // compare result.
5118 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5119 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005120 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005121 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
5122 return;
5123 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5124 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5125 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005126
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005127 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5128 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5129 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5130 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5131 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5132 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5133 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5134 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5135 return;
5136 }
5137
5138 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5139 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5140 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5141 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5142 } else {
5143 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005144 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5145 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5146 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005147 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5148 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5149 }
5150}
5151
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005152/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5153/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5154/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005155static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5156 const DataLayout &DL,
5157 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005158 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005159
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00005160 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005161 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005162 return false;
5163
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005164 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5165 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5166
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005167 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5168 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5169 // string and lookup indices into that.
5170
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005171 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
5172 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005173 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
5174 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005175 return false;
5176
5177 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005178 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005179 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5180 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
5181 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5182 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5183
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005184 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005185 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
5186 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
5187 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5188 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5189 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005190
5191 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
5192 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5193 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5194 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5195 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5196 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5197
5198 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005199 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005200 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00005201 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005202 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005203 return false;
5204
5205 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005206 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5207 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5208 Constant *Value = I.second;
5209 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5210 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5211 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005212 }
5213 }
5214
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005215 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005216 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005217 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5218 }
5219
5220 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5221 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5222 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5223 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5224
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005225 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5226 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005227 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005228 bool HasDefaultResults =
5229 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5230 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005231
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005232 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5233 if (NeedMask) {
5234 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005235 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005236 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005237 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005238 return false;
5239 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005240
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005241 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5242 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5243 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005244 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005245 }
5246
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005247 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005248 return false;
5249
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005250 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005251 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005252 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5253 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005254
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005255 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005256 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005257 Value *TableIndex =
5258 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005259
5260 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5261 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005262 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005263 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005264 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5265 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5266 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5267
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005268 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5269 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5270 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5271 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5272 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5273 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005274 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5275
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005276 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005277 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005278 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5279 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005280 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005281 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5282 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5283 RangeCheckBranch =
5284 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005285 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005286
5287 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5288 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005289
5290 if (NeedMask) {
5291 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
5292 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
5293 // and we create a new LookupBB.
5294 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5295 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005296 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5297 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005298
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005299 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
5300 // unnecessary illegal types.
5301 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5302 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5303 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005304 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005305 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5306 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005307 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5308 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005309 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5310 }
5311 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5312
5313 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5314 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5315 // else continue with table lookup.
5316 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005317 Value *MaskIndex =
5318 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5319 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5320 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5321 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005322 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5323
5324 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5325 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5326 }
5327
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005328 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5329 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
5330 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5331 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5332 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5333 }
5334
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005335 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005336 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5337 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005338 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005339
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005340 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5341 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005342 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005343
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005344 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005345
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005346 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5347 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005348 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5349 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005350 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5351 ReturnedEarly = true;
5352 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005353 }
5354
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005355 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5356 // possible.
5357 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5358 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5359 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5360 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5361 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5362 }
5363 }
5364
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005365 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005366 }
5367
5368 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5369 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5370
5371 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005372 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005373 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005374
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005375 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005376 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005377 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5378 }
5379 SI->eraseFromParent();
5380
5381 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005382 if (NeedMask)
5383 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005384 return true;
5385}
5386
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005387static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5388 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5389 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5390 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5391 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5392 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5393 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005394
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005395 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5396}
5397
5398// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5399// of cases.
5400//
5401// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5402// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5403//
5404// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5405// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5406static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5407 const DataLayout &DL,
5408 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5409 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5410 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5411 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5412 return false;
5413 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5414 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5415 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5416 return false;
5417
5418 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5419 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5420 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5421 // as signed.
5422 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5423 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5424 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5425 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5426
5427 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5428 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5429 return false;
5430
5431 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5432 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5433 for (auto &V : Values)
5434 V -= Base;
5435
5436 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5437 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5438 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5439 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5440 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005441 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005442
5443 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5444 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5445 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5446 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5447 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5448 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5449 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5450 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005451 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005452 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5453 return false;
5454
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005455 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005456 for (auto &V : Values)
5457 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5458
5459 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5460 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5461 return false;
5462
5463 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5464 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5465 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5466 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5467 //
5468 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5469 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5470 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5471 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005472
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005473 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5474 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5475 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5476 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005477 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5478 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5479 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005480 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5481
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005482 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt C = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); C != E;
5483 ++C) {
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005484 auto *Orig = C.getCaseValue();
5485 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005486 C.setValue(
5487 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005488 }
5489 return true;
5490}
5491
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005492bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005493 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5494
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005495 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5496 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5497 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5498 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5499 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005500 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005501
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005502 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5503 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5504 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005505 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005506
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005507 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5508 // away into any preds.
5509 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5510 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5511 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5512 ++BBI;
5513 if (SI == &*BBI)
5514 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005515 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005516 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005517
5518 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005519 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005520 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005521
5522 // Remove unreachable cases.
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005523 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, DL))
5524 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005525
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005526 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5527 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005528
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005529 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005530 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005531
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005532 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005533 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005534
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005535 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005536 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005537
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005538 return false;
5539}
5540
5541bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5542 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5543 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005544
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005545 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5546 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5547 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5548 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005549 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005550 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5551 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005552 --i;
5553 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005554 Changed = true;
5555 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005556 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005557
5558 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5559 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5560 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5561 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5562 return true;
5563 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005564
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005565 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5566 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5567 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5568 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5569 return true;
5570 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005571
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005572 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5573 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005574 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005575 }
5576 return Changed;
5577}
5578
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005579/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5580/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5581/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5582/// a shared handler.
5583///
5584/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5585/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5586/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5587/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5588/// sinking in this file)
5589///
5590/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5591/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5592/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5593/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5594/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5595/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5596///
5597/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5598/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5599/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5600static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5601 BasicBlock *BB) {
5602 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5603 assert(Succ);
5604 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5605 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5606 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5607 return false;
5608
5609 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5610 if (BB == OtherPred)
5611 continue;
5612 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5613 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5614 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5615 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005616 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5617 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005618 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5619 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5620 continue;
5621
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005622 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005623 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5624 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5625 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5626 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5627 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005628 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5629 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005630 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5631 }
5632
5633 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5634 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005635 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5636 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5637 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005638 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5639 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5640 }
5641
5642 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5643 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5644 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5645 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5646 }
5647
5648 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5649 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5650 BI->eraseFromParent();
5651 return true;
5652 }
5653 return false;
5654}
5655
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005656bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5657 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005658 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005659
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005660 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5661 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005662
5663 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5664 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005665 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5666 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5667 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5668 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005669 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005670 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005671 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005672 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5673 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005674
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005675 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5676 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5677 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5678 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5679 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5680 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005681 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005682 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005683 BonusInstThreshold))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005684 return true;
5685 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005686
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005687 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5688 // equivalent.
5689 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005690 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5691 }
5692 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005693 return true;
5694 }
5695
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005696 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5697 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5698 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5699 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005700 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005701 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005702 return false;
5703}
5704
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005705static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5706 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5707 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5708 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5709 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5710 return nullptr;
5711 PredPred = PPred;
5712 }
5713 return PredPred;
5714}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005715
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005716bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005717 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005718
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005719 // Conditional branch
5720 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5721 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5722 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5723 // switch.
5724 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005725 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005726 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005727
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005728 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5729 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5730 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5731 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5732 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5733 ++I;
5734 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005735 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005736 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005737 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005738 ++I;
5739 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5740 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5741 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005742 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005743 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005744 }
5745 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005746
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005747 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005748 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005749 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005750
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005751 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5752 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5753 // of the BI branch.
5754 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5755 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5756 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5757 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5758 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5759 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5760 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5761 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5762 if (Implication) {
5763 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5764 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5765 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5766 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5767 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5768 BI->setCondition(CI);
5769 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005770 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005771 }
5772 }
5773 }
5774
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005775 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5776 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5777 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005778 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005779 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005780
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005781 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5782 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5783 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5784 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005785 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5786 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005787 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005788 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005789 } else {
5790 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005791 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005792 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5793 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5794 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005795 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005796 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005797 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005798 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005799 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005800 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005801 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5802 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5803 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005804 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005805 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005806 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005807
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005808 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5809 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5810 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5811 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005812 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005813 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005814
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005815 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005816 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5817 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005818 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005819 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005820 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005821
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005822 // Look for diamond patterns.
5823 if (MergeCondStores)
5824 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5825 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5826 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5827 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005828 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005829
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005830 return false;
5831}
5832
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005833/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5834static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5835 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5836 if (!C)
5837 return false;
5838
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005839 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005840 return false;
5841
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005842 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005843 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005844 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005845
5846 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5847 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005848 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5849 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5850 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5851 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005852 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005853 return false;
5854
5855 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5856 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5857 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5858 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5859
5860 // Look through bitcasts.
5861 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5862 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5863
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005864 // Load from null is undefined.
5865 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005866 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5867 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005868
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005869 // Store to null is undefined.
5870 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005871 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005872 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5873 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005874
5875 // A call to null is undefined.
5876 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5877 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005878 }
5879 return false;
5880}
5881
5882/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005883/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005884static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5885 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5886 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5887 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5888 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5889 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5890 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5891 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5892 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5893 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5894 // destination from conditional branches.
5895 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5896 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5897 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005898 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5899 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005900 BI->eraseFromParent();
5901 return true;
5902 }
5903 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5904 }
5905
5906 return false;
5907}
5908
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005909bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005910 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005911
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005912 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005913 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005914
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005915 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5916 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005917 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005918 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005919 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5920 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5921 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005922 }
5923
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005924 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5925 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005926 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005927
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005928 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5929 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5930
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005931 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5932 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5933
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005934 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5935 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5936 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5937 //
5938 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5939 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005940
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005941 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5942
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005943 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5944 // eliminate it, do so now.
5945 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5946 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005947 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005948
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005949 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005950 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005951 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005952 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5953 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005954 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005955 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5956 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005957 }
5958 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005959 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5960 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005961 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005962 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5963 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005964 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005965 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5966 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5967 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005968 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005969 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5970 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005971 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005972 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5973 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5974 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005975 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005976 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5977 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
5978 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005979 }
5980
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005981 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005982}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005983
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005984/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5985/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005986/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5987/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5988///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005989bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005990 unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005991 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005992 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005993 BonusInstThreshold, LoopHeaders)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005994 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005995}